blob: 8a3a7d7cda26557b5761479237704fb9055d269b [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010087/**
88 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
89 *
90 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
91 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
92 * between different stations/interfaces.
93 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
94 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
95 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
96 *
97 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
98 * driver operation.
99 *
100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
101 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
102 *
103 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
104 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
105 *
106 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
107 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
108 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
109 *
110 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
111 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
112 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
113 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
114 * .release_buffered_frames().
115 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
116 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
117 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
118 */
119
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500120struct device;
121
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400122/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200123 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
124 *
125 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200127 */
128enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200129 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200131};
132
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200133#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
134
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200135/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800136 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
137 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
141 */
142enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
143 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
144 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
145 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
147};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200148#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800149
150/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400151 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
152 *
153 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100154 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400155 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400156 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200157 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
158 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400159 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100160 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300161 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200162 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400163 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700164struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200165 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100166 u16 cw_min;
167 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200168 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300169 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200170 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700171};
172
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700173struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
174 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
175 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
178};
179
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100180/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200181 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
186 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200188 */
189enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100190 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200195};
196
197/**
198 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
199 *
200 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
201 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
202 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100203 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200204 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200205 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
206 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
207 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
208 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100209 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100210 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200211 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
212 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
213 */
214struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100215 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200216 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200217
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200218 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
219
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100220 bool radar_enabled;
221
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100222 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200223};
224
225/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300226 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
227 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
228 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
229 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
230 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
231 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
232 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
233 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
234 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
235 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
236 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
237 * for changes/removal.)
238 */
239enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
240 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
242};
243
244/**
245 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
246 *
247 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
248 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
249 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
250 * done.
251 *
252 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
253 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
254 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
255 */
256struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
257 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
258 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
260};
261
262/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100263 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
264 *
265 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
266 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
267 *
268 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
269 * also implies a change in the AID.
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700273 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
277 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
279 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
281 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200282 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300284 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200285 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
286 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200287 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300290 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100292 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
293 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300294 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
295 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
297 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
298 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100299 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100300 */
301enum ieee80211_bss_change {
302 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
303 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
304 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200306 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200307 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
311 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200312 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200313 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300314 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200316 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300317 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100321 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300322 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100324 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200325
326 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100327};
328
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300329/*
330 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
331 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
332 * filtering will be disabled.
333 */
334#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
335
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100336/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200337 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
338 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200339 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300340 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300341 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
342 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
343 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700344 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200345enum ieee80211_event_type {
346 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200347 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300348 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300349 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200350};
351
352/**
353 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
354 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
355 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
356 */
357enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700358 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
359 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
360};
361
362/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200363 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200364 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
365 */
366struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
367 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
368};
369
370/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200371 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
372 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200373 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200374 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
375 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200376 */
377enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
378 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200379 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200380 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
381 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200382};
383
384/**
385 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
386 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
387 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
388 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
389 */
390enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
391 MLME_SUCCESS,
392 MLME_DENIED,
393 MLME_TIMEOUT,
394};
395
396/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200397 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200398 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
399 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
400 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
401 */
402struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
403 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
404 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
405 u16 reason;
406};
407
408/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300409 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
410 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
411 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300412 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300413 */
414struct ieee80211_ba_event {
415 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
416 u16 tid;
417 u16 ssn;
418};
419
420/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200421 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200422 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200423 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200424 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300425 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300426 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200427 */
428struct ieee80211_event {
429 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
430 union {
431 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200432 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300433 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200434 } u;
435};
436
437/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100438 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
439 *
440 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
441 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
442 *
443 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200444 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
445 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530446 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100447 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
448 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200449 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
450 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
451 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
452 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
453 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
454 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100455 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200456 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300457 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200458 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100459 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
460 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
461 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
462 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200463 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200464 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
465 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200466 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100467 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
468 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200469 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
470 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
471 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700472 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800473 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200474 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
475 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
476 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300477 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100478 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200479 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
480 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100481 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
482 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100483 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200484 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200485 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
486 * implies disabled
487 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300488 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
489 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
490 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
491 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100492 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
493 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
494 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200495 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200496 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
497 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
498 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300499 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
500 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200501 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300502 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
503 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200504 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100505 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
506 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
507 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
508 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
509 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
510 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100511 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100512 */
513struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200514 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100515 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200516 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530517 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100518 u16 aid;
519 /* erp related data */
520 bool use_cts_prot;
521 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300522 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200523 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800524 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700525 u16 beacon_int;
526 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200527 u64 sync_tsf;
528 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100529 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100530 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300531 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100532 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200533 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200534 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
535 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100536 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300537 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100538 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200539 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200540 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300541 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300542 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
543 size_t ssid_len;
544 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200545 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100546 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100547 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100548};
549
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800550/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200551 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800552 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700553 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800554 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100555 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200556 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
557 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
558 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
559 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
560 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
561 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
562 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
563 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
564 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
565 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
566 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200567 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200568 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
569 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200570 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200571 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
572 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200573 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200574 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200575 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
576 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
577 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
578 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
579 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
580 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
581 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
582 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200583 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
584 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
585 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300586 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
587 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200588 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
589 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
590 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600591 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
592 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
593 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100594 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
595 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
596 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200597 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
598 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200599 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
600 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100601 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
602 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
603 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200604 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
605 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
606 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
607 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100608 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
609 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
610 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100611 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
612 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
613 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200614 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
615 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
616 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400617 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200618 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
619 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100620 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
621 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
622 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
623 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200624 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
625 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
626 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530627 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
628 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
629 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200630 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
631 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
632 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200633 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
634 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530635 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
636 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
637 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200638 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
639 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
640 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530641 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
642 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
643 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
644 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
645 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200646 *
647 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
648 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800649 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200650enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200651 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200652 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
653 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
654 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
655 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
656 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
657 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
658 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
659 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
660 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
661 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
662 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
663 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600664 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100665 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200666 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200667 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100668 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200669 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100670 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100671 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200672 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400673 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200676 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200678 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530681 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200682};
683
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200684#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
685
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200686/**
687 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
688 *
689 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
690 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530691 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
692 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200693 *
694 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
695 */
696enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
697 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530698 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200699};
700
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200701/*
702 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
703 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
704 */
705#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
706 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
708 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
709 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100710 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200711 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200712 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200713
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530714/**
715 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
716 * Rate Control algorithm.
717 *
718 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
719 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
720 *
721 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
722 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
723 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
724 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
725 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100726 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
727 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530728 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
729 * Greenfield mode.
730 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100731 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
732 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
733 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530734 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
735 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
736 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
737 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
738 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200739enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
740 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
741 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
742 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
743
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100744 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200745 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
746 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
747 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
748 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
749 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100750 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
751 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
752 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800753};
754
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200755
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200756/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
757#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200758
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200759/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
760#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
761
762/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200763#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200764
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200765/* maximum number of rate table entries */
766#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
767
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200768/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200769 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200770 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200771 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
772 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200773 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200774 *
775 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
776 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
777 *
778 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
779 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200780 *
781 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
782 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
783 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
784 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
785 * information
786 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
787 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
788 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
789 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
790 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
791 * information should then contain
792 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
793 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
794 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200795 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200796struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
797 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100798 u16 count:5,
799 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000800} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200801
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100802#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
803
804static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
805 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
806{
807 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200808 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
809 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100810}
811
812static inline u8
813ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
814{
815 return rate->idx & 0xF;
816}
817
818static inline u8
819ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
820{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200821 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100822}
823
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200824/**
825 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200826 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200827 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
828 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
829 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
830 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
831 *
832 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200833 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200834 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100835 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700836 * @control: union for control data
837 * @status: union for status data
838 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100839 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700840 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100841 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700842 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200843 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200844 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200845struct ieee80211_tx_info {
846 /* common information */
847 u32 flags;
848 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200849
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200850 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100851
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100852 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100853
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200854 union {
855 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200856 union {
857 /* rate control */
858 struct {
859 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
860 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
861 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200862 u8 use_rts:1;
863 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200864 u8 short_preamble:1;
865 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200866 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200867 };
868 /* only needed before rate control */
869 unsigned long jiffies;
870 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200871 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200872 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
873 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200874 u32 flags;
875 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200876 } control;
877 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200878 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200879 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200880 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100881 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200882 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300883 u16 tx_time;
884 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200885 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200886 struct {
887 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
888 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200889 u8 pad[4];
890
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200891 void *rate_driver_data[
892 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
893 };
894 void *driver_data[
895 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200896 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700897};
898
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300899/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200900 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
901 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200902 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
903 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
904 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200905 *
906 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
907 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
908 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
909 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
910 */
911struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
912 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
913 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
914 const u8 *common_ies;
915 size_t common_ie_len;
916};
917
918
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200919static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
920{
921 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
922}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400923
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200924static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
925{
926 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
927}
928
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200929/**
930 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
931 *
932 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
933 *
934 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
935 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
936 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
937 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
938 *
939 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
940 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
941 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
942 */
943static inline void
944ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
945{
946 int i;
947
948 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
949 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
950 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
951 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
952 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
953 /* clear the rate counts */
954 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
955 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
956
957 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200958 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200959 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
960 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
961 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
962}
963
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400964
965/**
966 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
967 *
968 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
969 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
970 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
971 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400972 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
973 * verification has been done by the hardware.
974 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
975 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
976 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400977 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
978 * the frame.
979 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
980 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800981 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100982 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
983 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
984 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800985 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
986 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
987 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200988 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200989 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100990 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200991 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
992 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100993 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
994 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200995 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
996 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
997 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200998 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
999 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1000 * each A-MPDU
1001 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
1002 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
1003 * monitoring purposes only
1004 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1005 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1006 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1007 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1008 * on this subframe
1009 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1010 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001011 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001012 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001013 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1014 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001015 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1016 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1017 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1018 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1019 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1020 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1021 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1022 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1023 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001024 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1025 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1026 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001027 */
1028enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001029 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1030 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1031 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1032 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1033 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1034 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001035 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001036 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1037 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1038 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1039 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1040 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1041 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1042 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
1043 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
1044 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
1045 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1046 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1047 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1048 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001049 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001050 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001051 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001052 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001053 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1054 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001055 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001056 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001057};
1058
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001059#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1060
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001061/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001062 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1063 *
1064 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1065 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1066 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001067 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001068 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001069 */
1070enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1071 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001072 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1073 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001074};
1075
1076/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001077 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1078 *
1079 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1080 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001081 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001082 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001083 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1084 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001085 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1086 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001087 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001088 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001089 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1090 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1091 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001092 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1093 * values were filled.
1094 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1095 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001096 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001097 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001098 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1099 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001100 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001101 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001102 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001103 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1104 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1105 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001106 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001107struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1108 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001109 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001110 u32 ampdu_reference;
1111 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001112 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001113 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001114 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001115 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001116 u8 rx_flags;
1117 u8 band;
1118 u8 antenna;
1119 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001120 u8 chains;
1121 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001122 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001123};
1124
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001125/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001126 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1127 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1128 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1129 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1130 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1131 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1132 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1133 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1134 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1135 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1136 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1137 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1138 * @data field.
1139 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1140 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1141 * length
1142 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1143 *
1144 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1145 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1146 * data.
1147 */
1148struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1149 u32 present;
1150 u8 align;
1151 u8 oui[3];
1152 u8 subns;
1153 u8 pad;
1154 u16 len;
1155 u8 data[];
1156} __packed;
1157
1158/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001159 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1160 *
1161 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1162 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001163 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1164 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1165 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001166 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1167 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1168 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1169 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1170 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1171 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1172 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001173 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1174 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1175 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1176 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1177 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001178 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1179 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001180 */
1181enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001182 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001183 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001184 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001185 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001186};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001187
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001188
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001189/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001190 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1191 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001192 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001193 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001194 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001195 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001196 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001197 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001198 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001199 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001200 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1201 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001202 */
1203enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001204 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001205 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001206 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001207 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001208 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1209 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1210 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001211 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001212};
1213
1214/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001215 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1216 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001217 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1218 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1219 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1220 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1221 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001222 */
1223enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1224 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1225 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1226 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1227 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1228
1229 /* keep last */
1230 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1231};
1232
1233/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001234 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1235 *
1236 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1237 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001238 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1239 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001240 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001241 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001242 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1243 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1244 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1245 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001246 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1247 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1248 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001249 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1250 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1251 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1252 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001253 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1254 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001255 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001256 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001257 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001258 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001259 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001260 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1261 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001262 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001263 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1264 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001265 *
1266 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1267 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001268 * configured for an HT channel.
1269 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1270 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001271 */
1272struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001273 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001274 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001275 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001276
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001277 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001278 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001279
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001280 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1281
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001282 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001283 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001284 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001285};
1286
1287/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001288 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1289 *
1290 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1291 * operation.
1292 *
1293 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1294 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1295 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1296 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001297 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1298 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001299 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1300 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001301 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001302 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1303 */
1304struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1305 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001306 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001307 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001308 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001309 u8 count;
1310};
1311
1312/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001313 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1314 *
1315 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1316 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001317 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1318 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1319 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1320 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001321 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1322 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1323 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1324 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001325 */
1326enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1327 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001328 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001329 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001330};
1331
1332/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001333 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1334 *
1335 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1336 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1337 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001338 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001339 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1340 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001341 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001342 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1343 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001344 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1345 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1346 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001347 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1348 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1349 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1350 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001351 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1352 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001353 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1354 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1355 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1356 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1357 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001358 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001359 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001360 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001361 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1362 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001363 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001364 */
1365struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001366 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001367 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001368 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001369 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001370 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001371
1372 u8 cab_queue;
1373 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1374
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001375 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1376
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001377 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1378
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001379 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001380
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001381#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1382 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1383#endif
1384
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001385 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001386 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001387};
1388
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001389static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1390{
1391#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001392 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001393#endif
1394 return false;
1395}
1396
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001397/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001398 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1399 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1400 *
1401 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1402 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1403 *
1404 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1405 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1406 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1407 */
1408struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1409
1410/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001411 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1412 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1413 *
1414 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1415 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1416 *
1417 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1418 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1419 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1420 */
1421struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1422
1423/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001424 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1425 *
1426 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1427 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1428 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001429 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1430 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001431 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1432 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001433 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1434 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1435 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001436 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1437 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001438 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001439 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1440 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001441 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001442 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001443 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001444 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1445 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1446 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001447 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1448 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1449 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1450 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1451 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1452 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1453 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001454 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001455 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001456 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001457 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1458 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1459 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001460 */
1461enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001462 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1463 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1464 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1465 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1466 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1467 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1468 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001469 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001470};
1471
1472/**
1473 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1474 *
1475 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1476 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1477 *
1478 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1479 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001480 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001481 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001482 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1483 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1484 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001485 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1486 * data block:
1487 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1488 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1489 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001490 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1491 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001492 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001493struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001494 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001495 u8 icv_len;
1496 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001497 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001498 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001499 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001500 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001501 u8 key[0];
1502};
1503
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001504/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001505 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1506 *
1507 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1508 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1509 *
1510 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1511 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1512 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1513 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1514 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1515 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1516 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1517 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1518 * key_idx value calculation:
1519 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1520 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1521 */
1522struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1523 u32 cipher;
1524 u16 iftype;
1525 u8 hdr_len;
1526 u8 pn_len;
1527 u8 pn_off;
1528 u8 key_idx_off;
1529 u8 key_idx_mask;
1530 u8 key_idx_shift;
1531 u8 mic_len;
1532};
1533
1534/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001535 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1536 *
1537 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1538 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1539 *
1540 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1541 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1542 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001543enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001544 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001545};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001546
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001547/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001548 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1549 *
1550 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1551 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1552 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1553 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1554 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1555 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1556 */
1557enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1558 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1559 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1560 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1561 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1562 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1563 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1564};
1565
1566/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001567 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1568 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1569 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1570 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1571 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1572 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1573 *
1574 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1575 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1576 */
1577enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1578 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1579 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1580 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1581 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1582};
1583
1584/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001585 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1586 *
1587 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001588 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001589 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1590 */
1591struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1592 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1593 struct {
1594 s8 idx;
1595 u8 count;
1596 u8 count_cts;
1597 u8 count_rts;
1598 u16 flags;
1599 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1600};
1601
1602/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001603 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1604 *
1605 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1606 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1607 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1608 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1609 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001610 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001611 *
1612 * @addr: MAC address
1613 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001614 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001615 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1616 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001617 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1618 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001619 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1620 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001621 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1622 * if wme is supported.
1623 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001624 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001625 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1626 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1627 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1628 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001629 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001630 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001631 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001632 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1633 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
SenthilKumar Jegadeesan64a8cef2015-03-02 13:29:40 +05301634 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001635 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001636 */
1637struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001638 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001639 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1640 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001641 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001642 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001643 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001644 u8 uapsd_queues;
1645 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001646 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001647 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001648 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001649 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001650 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001651 bool tdls_initiator;
SenthilKumar Jegadeesan64a8cef2015-03-02 13:29:40 +05301652 bool mfp;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001653
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001654 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1655
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001656 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001657 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001658};
1659
1660/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001661 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1662 *
1663 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301664 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001665 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001666 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1667 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1668 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001669enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001670 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1671};
1672
1673/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001674 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1675 *
1676 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1677 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1678 */
1679struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1680 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1681};
1682
1683/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001684 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1685 *
1686 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1687 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1688 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1689 * @ac: the AC for this queue
1690 *
1691 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1692 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1693 */
1694struct ieee80211_txq {
1695 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1696 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1697 u8 tid;
1698 u8 ac;
1699
1700 /* must be last */
1701 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1702};
1703
1704/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001705 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1706 *
1707 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1708 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1709 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1710 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1711 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1712 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001713 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1714 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1715 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1716 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1717 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1718 * algorithm.
1719 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1720 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1721 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1722 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1723 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1724 * CCK frames.
1725 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001726 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1727 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1728 * the FCS at the end.
1729 *
1730 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1731 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1732 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1733 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1734 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1735 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001736 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001737 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001738 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1739 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1740 *
1741 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1742 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1743 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001744 *
1745 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1746 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1747 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1748 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1749 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001750 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1751 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1752 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1753 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1754 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001755 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1756 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1757 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301758 *
1759 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1760 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001761 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001762 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1763 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1764 *
1765 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1766 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1767 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1768 *
1769 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1770 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001771 *
1772 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1773 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001774 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301775 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1776 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1777 * the stack.
1778 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001779 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001780 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1781 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001782 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001783 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1784 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1785 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001786 *
1787 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1788 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1789 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1790 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1791 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1792 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001793 *
1794 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1795 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1796 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1797 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1798 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1799 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001800 *
1801 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1802 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1803 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001804 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001805 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1806 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1807 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001808 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001809 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1810 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1811 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1812 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001813 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1814 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1815 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1816 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1817 * supported cipher suites.
1818 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001819 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1820 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1821 * for frames.
1822 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001823 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1824 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1825 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1826 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001827 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001828 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1829 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1830 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001831 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1832 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1833 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001834 *
1835 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1836 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001837 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001838 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1839 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1840 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1841 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001842 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1843 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1844 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1845 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001846 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001847 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1848 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1849 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001850 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1851 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001852 */
1853enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001854 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001855 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1856 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001857 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1858 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001859 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001860 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001861 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001862 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1863 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1864 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1865 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1866 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1867 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001868 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001869 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001870 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL = 1<<16,
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001871 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301872 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001873 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001874 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001875 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001876 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001877 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001878 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001879 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001880 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001881 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001882 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001883 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001884 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001885};
1886
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001887/**
1888 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001889 *
1890 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1891 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1892 *
1893 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1894 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1895 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001896 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1897 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001898 *
1899 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1900 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001901 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1902 * along with this structure.
1903 *
1904 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1905 *
1906 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1907 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1908 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001909 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1910 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001911 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001912 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001913 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001914 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001915 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001916 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001917 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001918 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001919 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1920 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1921 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001922 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1923 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1924 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001925 *
1926 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1927 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001928 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1929 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001930 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1931 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001932 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1933 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001934 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001935 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1936 * can handle.
1937 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1938 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001939 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001940 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001941 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1942 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1943 * aggregation.
1944 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1945 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1946 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001947 *
1948 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1949 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1950 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001951 *
1952 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1953 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001954 *
1955 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1956 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1957 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1958 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001959 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001960 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1961 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1962 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1963 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001964 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02001965 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
1966 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001967 *
1968 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1969 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1970 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1971 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1972 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1973 * neither enabled.
1974 *
1975 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1976 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1977 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001978 *
1979 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1980 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1981 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001982 *
1983 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
1984 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001985 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001986struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001987 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001988 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001989 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001990 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001991 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001992 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001993 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001994 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001995 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001996 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001997 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001998 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001999 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002000 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002001 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002002 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002003 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002004 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002005 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002006 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002007 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002008 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002009 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002010 u8 uapsd_queues;
2011 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002012 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2013 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002014 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002015};
2016
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002017/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002018 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2019 *
2020 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2021 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2022 */
2023struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2024 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2025
2026 /* Keep last */
2027 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2028};
2029
2030/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002031 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2032 *
2033 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2034 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2035 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2036 * @status: channel-switch response status
2037 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2038 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2039 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2040 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2041 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2042 */
2043struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2044 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2045 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2046 u8 action_code;
2047 u32 status;
2048 u32 timestamp;
2049 u16 switch_time;
2050 u16 switch_timeout;
2051 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2052 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2053};
2054
2055/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002056 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2057 *
2058 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2059 *
2060 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2061 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2062 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2063 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2064 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002065 *
2066 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002067 */
2068struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2069
2070/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002071 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2072 *
2073 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2074 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2075 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002076static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2077{
2078 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2079}
2080
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002081/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002082 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002083 *
2084 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2085 * @addr: the address to set
2086 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002087static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
2088{
2089 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2090}
2091
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002092static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2093ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002094 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002095{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002096 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002097 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002098 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002099}
2100
2101static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2102ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002103 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002104{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002105 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002106 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002107 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002108}
2109
2110static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2111ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002112 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002113{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002114 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002115 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002116 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002117}
2118
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002119/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002120 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2121 * @hw: the hardware
2122 * @skb: the skb
2123 *
2124 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2125 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2126 */
2127void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2128
2129/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002130 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002131 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002132 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2133 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2134 *
2135 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2136 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002137 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2138 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2139 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002140 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2141 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2142 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002143 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2144 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2145 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2146 *
2147 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2148 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2149 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2150 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2151 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002152 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2153 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2154 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2155 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2156 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002157 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2158 *
2159 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2160 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2161 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2162 * based on the receive flags.
2163 *
2164 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2165 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2166 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2167 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002168 *
2169 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2170 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2171 * handler.
2172 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002173 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002174 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2175 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002176 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002177 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002178 *
2179 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2180 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2181 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002182 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002183
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002184/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002185 * DOC: Powersave support
2186 *
2187 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2188 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002189 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2190 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2191 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2192 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2193 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2194 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2195 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2196 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002197 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002198 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2199 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2200 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002201 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2202 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002203 *
2204 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2205 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2206 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002207 *
2208 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2209 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2210 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2211 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002212 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2213 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002214 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002215 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002216 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2217 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2218 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2219 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2220 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2221 * periods.
2222 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002223 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002224 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2225 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2226 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2227 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2228 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2229 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2230 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2231 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2232 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2233 *
2234 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002235 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002236 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002237 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2238 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2239 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2240 *
2241 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2242 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002243 */
2244
2245/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002246 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2247 *
2248 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002249 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002250 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2251 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2252 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2253 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2254 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2255 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002256 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2257 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002258 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2259 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2260 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2261 *
2262 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2263 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2264 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2265 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2266 *
2267 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2268 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2269 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2270 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2271 * - a list of information element IDs
2272 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2273 *
2274 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2275 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2276 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2277 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2278 * vendor information elements.
2279 *
2280 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2281 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2282 *
2283 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2284 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2285 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2286 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2287 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2288 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2289 *
2290 *
2291 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2292 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2293 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2294 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2295 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2296 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2297 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2298 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2299 *
2300 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2301 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2302 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002303 */
2304
2305/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002306 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2307 *
2308 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2309 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2310 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2311 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2312 *
2313 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2314 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2315 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2316 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2317 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2318 * hardware flags.
2319 *
2320 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2321 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2322 * turned off otherwise.
2323 *
2324 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2325 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2326 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2327 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2328 */
2329
2330/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002331 * DOC: Frame filtering
2332 *
2333 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2334 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2335 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2336 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2337 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2338 *
2339 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2340 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2341 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2342 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002343 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2344 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2345 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2346 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2347 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2348 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2349 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002350 *
2351 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2352 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2353 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2354 * or dropped.
2355 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002356 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2357 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2358 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2359 * the flag, but not clear it.
2360 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2361 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2362 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2363 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2364 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2365 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2366 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2367 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002368 */
2369
2370/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002371 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2372 *
2373 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2374 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2375 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2376 *
2377 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2378 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2379 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2380 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2381 * the driver code.
2382 *
2383 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2384 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2385 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2386 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2387 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2388 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2389 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2390 *
2391 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2392 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2393 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2394 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2395 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2396 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2397 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2398 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2399 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2400 * @sta_notify callback.
2401 *
2402 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2403 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2404 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2405 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2406 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2407 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2408 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002409 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002410 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2411 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2412 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2413 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2414 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2415 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2416 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002417 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2418 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2419 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002420 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2421 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2422 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2423 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2424 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2425 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2426 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2427 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2428 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2429 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2430 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2431 *
2432 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2433 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2434 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2435 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2436 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2437 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2438 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2439 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2440 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2441 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002442 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002443 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2444 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2445 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2446 *
2447 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2448 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2449 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2450 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2451 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002452 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002453 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2454 *
2455 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2456 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2457 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2458 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002459 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002460 *
2461 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2462 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2463 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2464 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002465 */
2466
2467/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002468 * DOC: HW queue control
2469 *
2470 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2471 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2472 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2473 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2474 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2475 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2476 *
2477 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2478 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2479 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2480 *
2481 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2482 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2483 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2484 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2485 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2486 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2487 * the hardware queue.
2488 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2489 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2490 *
2491 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2492 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2493 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2494 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2495 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2496 *
2497 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2498 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2499 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2500 * off-channel queue: 9
2501 *
2502 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2503 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2504 *
2505 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2506 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2507 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2508 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2509 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2510 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2511 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2512 *
2513 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2514 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2515 *
2516 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2517 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2518 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2519 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2520 */
2521
2522/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002523 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2524 *
2525 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2526 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2527 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2528 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2529 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002530 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2531 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2532 * multicast address.
2533 *
2534 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2535 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2536 *
2537 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2538 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2539 *
2540 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2541 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2542 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2543 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2544 * honour this flag if possible.
2545 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002546 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2547 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002548 *
2549 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002550 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002551 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2552 * those addressed to this station.
2553 *
2554 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002555 */
2556enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002557 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2558 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2559 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2560 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2561 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2562 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002563 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002564 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002565};
2566
2567/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002568 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2569 *
2570 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2571 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002572 *
2573 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2574 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002575 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002576 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2577 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002578 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2579 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2580 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002581 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002582 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2583 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2584 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2585 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2586 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2587 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2588 * session is gone and removes the station.
2589 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2590 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2591 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2592 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002593 */
2594enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2595 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2596 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002597 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002598 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2599 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2600 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002601 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002602};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002603
2604/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002605 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2606 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002607 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2608 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002609 */
2610enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2611 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002612 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002613};
2614
2615/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002616 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2617 *
2618 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002619 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2620 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2621 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002622 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002623 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2624 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2625 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002626 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2627 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002628 */
2629enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2630 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2631 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002632 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002633 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002634};
2635
2636/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002637 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2638 *
2639 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2640 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2641 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2642 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2643 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2644 *
2645 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2646 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2647 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2648 */
2649enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2650 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2651 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2652};
2653
2654/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002655 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2656 *
2657 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2658 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2659 *
2660 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2661 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2662 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2663 * of wowlan configuration)
2664 */
2665enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2666 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2667 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2668};
2669
2670/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002671 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2672 *
2673 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2674 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2675 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2676 *
2677 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2678 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2679 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002680 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002681 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002682 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002683 *
2684 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2685 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2686 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2687 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2688 * or zero.
2689 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2690 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2691 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002692 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002693 *
2694 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2695 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2696 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2697 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002698 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2699 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002700 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002701 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002702 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2703 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2704 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2705 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2706 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002707 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2708 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2709 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2710 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002711 *
2712 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2713 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2714 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2715 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2716 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2717 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002718 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2719 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2720 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2721 * in suspend().
2722 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002723 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002724 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002725 * and @stop must be implemented.
2726 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2727 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2728 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2729 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2730 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002731 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002732 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002733 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2734 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2735 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2736 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2737 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2738 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002739 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2740 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2741 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2742 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2743 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2744 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2745 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002746 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002747 *
2748 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2749 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002750 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002751 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002752 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002753 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2754 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2755 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2756 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2757 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002758 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2759 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002760 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002761 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2762 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2763 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2764 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002765 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2766 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002767 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002768 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002769 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002770 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002771 *
2772 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002773 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2774 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002775 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002776 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002777 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002778 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002779 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2780 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2781 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002782 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002783 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002784 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2785 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2786 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2787 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2788 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2789 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002790 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2791 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2792 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2793 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002794 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002795 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002796 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2797 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002798 * that power save is disabled.
2799 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2800 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2801 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2802 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2803 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2804 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2805 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002806 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002807 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002808 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2809 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2810 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2811 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2812 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2813 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2814 * The callback can sleep.
2815 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002816 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2817 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2818 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2819 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2820 *
2821 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002822 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002823 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002824 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2825 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002826 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2827 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2828 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002829 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002830 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2831 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2832 * this notification.
2833 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002834 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002835 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2836 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002837 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002838 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002839 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2840 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2841 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002842 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002843 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002844 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2845 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2846 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2847 * The callback can sleep.
2848 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002849 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002850 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002851 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002852 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2853 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2854 *
2855 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002856 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2857 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2858 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2859 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2860 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002861 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302862 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2863 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2864 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2865 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2866 *
2867 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2868 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2869 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002870 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002871 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2872 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2873 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002874 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002875 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2876 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2877 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2878 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002879 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2880 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2881 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2882 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2883 * The callback can sleep.
2884 *
2885 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2886 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2887 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2888 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2889 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002890 * The callback can sleep.
2891 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002892 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2893 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2894 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2895 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2896 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2897 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2898 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002899 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2900 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2901 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002902 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002903 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2904 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2905 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2906 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2907 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2908 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2909 * The callback can sleep.
2910 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002911 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002912 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002913 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002914 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002915 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002916 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002917 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002918 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002919 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002920 *
2921 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002922 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002923 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002924 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002925 *
2926 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2927 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2928 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2929 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002930 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002931 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002932 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2933 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2934 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002935 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002936 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002937 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002938 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2939 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2940 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2941 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002942 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002943 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002944 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2945 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002946 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2947 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2948 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2949 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2950 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2951 * - TX: 1.....7
2952 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2953 * - TX: 8..1...
2954 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2955 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2956 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2957 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2958 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002959 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002960 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002961 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002962 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2963 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002964 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2965 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2966 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002967 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002968 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002969 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2970 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002971 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2972 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2973 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002974 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002975 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2976 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002977 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002978 *
2979 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002980 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2981 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2982 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2983 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002984 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002985 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002986 *
2987 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2988 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2989 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2990 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002991 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002992 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2993 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2994 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2995 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2996 *
2997 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002998 *
2999 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3000 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3001 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3002 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3003 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3004 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003005 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003006 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3007 * must be accepted in this case.
3008 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003009 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3010 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003011 *
3012 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3013 *
3014 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303015 *
3016 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3017 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303018 *
3019 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3020 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3021 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003022 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3023 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003024 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003025 *
3026 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3027 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3028 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3029 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003030 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003031 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3032 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3033 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3034 * more-data bit must always be set.
3035 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3036 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003037 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3038 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3039 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3040 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3041 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3042 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003043 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3044 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3045 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003046 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3047 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003048 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003049 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003050 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003051 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3052 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3053 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003054 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003055 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3056 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3057 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3058 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003059 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003060 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003061 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3062 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3063 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003064 *
3065 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3066 *
3067 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3068 *
3069 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3070 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3071 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003072 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3073 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3074 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3075 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3076 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3077 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3078 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3079 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3080 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3081 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3082 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3083 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003084 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003085 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3086 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3087 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3088 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3089 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3090 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3091 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3092 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3093 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003094 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3095 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3096 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3097 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3098 * channel context with different settings
3099 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3100 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3101 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3102 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003103 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3104 * another, as specified in the list of
3105 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3106 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3107 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003108 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3109 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3110 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3111 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3112 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3113 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3114 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003115 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003116 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3117 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3118 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3119 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3120 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003121 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003122 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3123 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3124 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003125 *
3126 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3127 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3128 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003129 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003130 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3131 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003132 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003133 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003134 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3135 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003136 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3137 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3138 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3139 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003140 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3141 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3142 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003143 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003144 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3145 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3146 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3147 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003148 *
3149 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3150 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3151 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003152 *
3153 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3154 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003155 *
3156 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3157 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3158 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3159 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3160 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3161 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3162 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3163 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3164 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003165 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3166 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3167 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3168 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3169 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3170 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3171 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003172 *
3173 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003174 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003175struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003176 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3177 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3178 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003179 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003180 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003181#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3182 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3183 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003184 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003185#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003186 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003187 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003188 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3189 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003190 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003191 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003193 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003194 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3195 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3196 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3197 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003198
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003199 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3200 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3201
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003202 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003203 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003204 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3205 unsigned int changed_flags,
3206 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003207 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003208 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3209 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003210 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003211 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003212 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003213 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003214 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3215 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3216 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3217 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003218 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3219 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3220 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003221 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3222 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003223 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003224 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003225 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3226 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003227 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3228 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3229 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003230 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003231 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003232 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003233 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3234 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3235 const u8 *mac_addr);
3236 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3237 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003238 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3239 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01003240 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
3241 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003242 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003243 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003244 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3245 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3246 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3247 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303248#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3249 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3250 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3251 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3252 struct dentry *dir);
3253 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3254 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3255 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3256 struct dentry *dir);
3257#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003258 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003259 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003260 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3261 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3262 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3263 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003264 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3266 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003267 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3269 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3270 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003271 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3272 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3273 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003274 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3275 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3276 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3277 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003278 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003279 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003280 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003281 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3282 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3283 u64 tsf);
3284 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003285 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003286 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003287 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003288 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003289 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3290 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003291 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3292 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003293 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003294 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003295#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003296 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3297 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003298 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3299 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3300 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003301#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003302 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3303 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003304 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003305 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003306 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003307 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3308 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003309
3310 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003311 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003312 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003313 int duration,
3314 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003315 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003316 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3317 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3318 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303319 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303320 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3321 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003322 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3323 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3324 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003325
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003326 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3327 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3328 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3329 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3330 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003331 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3332 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3333 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3334 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3335 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003336
3337 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3338 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3339 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3340 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3341 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3342 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3343 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3344 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003345
3346 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3347 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003348
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003349 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3351
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003352 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3353 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3354 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3355 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3356 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3357 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3358 u32 changed);
3359 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3360 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3361 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3362 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3363 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3364 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003365 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3366 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3367 int n_vifs,
3368 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003369
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003370 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3371 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003372
3373#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3374 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3375 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3376 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3377#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003378 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3379 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3380 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003381 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3382 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3383 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003384
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003385 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3386 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3387
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003388 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3389 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003390 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003391 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3392 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003393
3394 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3395 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3396 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3397 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003398 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003399 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3400 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3401 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003402 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3403 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3404 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003405
3406 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3407 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003408};
3409
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003410/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003411 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3412 *
3413 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3414 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3415 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3416 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3417 * @priv_data_len.
3418 *
3419 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3420 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3421 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3422 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3423 *
3424 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3425 */
3426struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3427 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3428 const char *requested_name);
3429
3430/**
3431 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003432 *
3433 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3434 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3435 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3436 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3437 * @priv_data_len.
3438 *
3439 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3440 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003441 *
3442 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003443 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003444static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003445struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003446 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3447{
3448 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3449}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003450
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003451/**
3452 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3453 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003454 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3455 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3456 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003457 *
3458 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003459 *
3460 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003461 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003462int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3463
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003464/**
3465 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3466 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3467 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3468 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3469 */
3470struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3471 int throughput;
3472 int blink_time;
3473};
3474
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003475/**
3476 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3477 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3478 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3479 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3480 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3481 */
3482enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3483 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3484 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3485 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3486};
3487
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003488#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003489const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3490const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3491const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3492const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3493const char *
3494__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3495 unsigned int flags,
3496 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3497 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003498#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003499/**
3500 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3501 *
3502 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3503 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3504 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3505 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3506 *
3507 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003508 *
3509 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003510 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003511static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003512{
3513#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3514 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3515#else
3516 return NULL;
3517#endif
3518}
3519
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003520/**
3521 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3522 *
3523 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3524 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3525 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3526 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3527 *
3528 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003529 *
3530 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003531 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003532static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003533{
3534#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3535 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3536#else
3537 return NULL;
3538#endif
3539}
3540
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003541/**
3542 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3543 *
3544 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3545 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3546 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3547 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3548 *
3549 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003550 *
3551 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003552 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003553static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003554{
3555#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3556 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3557#else
3558 return NULL;
3559#endif
3560}
3561
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003562/**
3563 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3564 *
3565 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3566 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3567 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3568 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3569 *
3570 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003571 *
3572 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003573 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003574static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003575{
3576#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3577 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3578#else
3579 return NULL;
3580#endif
3581}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003582
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003583/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003584 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3585 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003586 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003587 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3588 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3589 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003590 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3591 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3592 *
3593 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003594 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003595static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003596ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003597 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3598 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3599{
3600#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003601 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003602 blink_table_len);
3603#else
3604 return NULL;
3605#endif
3606}
3607
3608/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003609 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3610 *
3611 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3612 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3613 *
3614 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3615 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003616void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3617
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003618/**
3619 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3620 *
3621 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3622 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003623 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003624 *
3625 * @hw: the hardware to free
3626 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003627void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3628
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003629/**
3630 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3631 *
3632 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3633 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3634 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3635 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3636 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3637 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3638 *
3639 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3640 */
3641void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3642
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003643/**
3644 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3645 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3646 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3647 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3648 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3649 * @poll: poll function
3650 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003651 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003652 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003653 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003654void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3655 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3656 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3657 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003658
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003659/**
3660 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3661 *
3662 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003663 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3664 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3665 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3666 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003667 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003668 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003669 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3670 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003671 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3672 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003673 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003674 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003675 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003676 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3677 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003678 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003679void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003680
3681/**
3682 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3683 *
3684 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003685 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3686 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003687 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003688 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3689 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003690 *
3691 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3692 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003693 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003694void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003695
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003696/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003697 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3698 *
3699 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3700 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3701 *
3702 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003703 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3704 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003705 *
3706 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3707 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3708 */
3709static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3710 struct sk_buff *skb)
3711{
3712 local_bh_disable();
3713 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3714 local_bh_enable();
3715}
3716
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003717/**
3718 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3719 *
3720 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3721 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3722 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3723 *
3724 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3725 *
3726 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3727 * each other.
3728 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003729 * @sta: currently connected sta
3730 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003731 *
3732 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003733 */
3734int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3735
3736/**
3737 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3738 * (in process context)
3739 *
3740 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3741 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3742 * applies.
3743 *
3744 * @sta: currently connected sta
3745 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003746 *
3747 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003748 */
3749static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3750 bool start)
3751{
3752 int ret;
3753
3754 local_bh_disable();
3755 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3756 local_bh_enable();
3757
3758 return ret;
3759}
3760
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003761/*
3762 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3763 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3764 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003765#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003766
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003767/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003768 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003769 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003770 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3771 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003772 *
3773 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003774 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3775 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003776 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003777 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3778 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3779 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3780 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3781 *
3782 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3783 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3784 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3785 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3786 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3787 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3788 *
3789 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3790 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3791 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3792 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3793 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003794 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003795void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3796 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003797
3798/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003799 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3800 *
3801 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3802 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3803 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3804 *
3805 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3806 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3807 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3808 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3809 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3810 */
3811void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3812 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3813 struct sk_buff *skb,
3814 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3815 int max_rates);
3816
3817/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003818 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3819 *
3820 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3821 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3822 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3823 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003824 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3825 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003826 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003827 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3828 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003829 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003830 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3831 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003832 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003833void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003834 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003835
3836/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003837 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3838 *
3839 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3840 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3841 * specific skbs.
3842 *
3843 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3844 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3845 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3846 *
3847 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3848 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3849 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3850 * @info: tx status information
3851 */
3852void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3853 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3854 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3855
3856/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003857 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3858 *
3859 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3860 *
3861 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3862 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3863 * for a single hardware.
3864 *
3865 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3866 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3867 */
3868static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3869 struct sk_buff *skb)
3870{
3871 local_bh_disable();
3872 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3873 local_bh_enable();
3874}
3875
3876/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003877 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003878 *
3879 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3880 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3881 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003882 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3883 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003884 *
3885 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3886 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003887 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003888void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003889 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003890
3891/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003892 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3893 *
3894 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3895 * connected STA.
3896 *
3897 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3898 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3899 */
3900void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3901
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003902#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3903
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003904/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003905 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3906 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3907 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003908 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3909 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3910 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003911 */
3912struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3913 u16 tim_offset;
3914 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003915
3916 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003917};
3918
3919/**
3920 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3921 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3922 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3923 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3924 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3925 *
3926 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3927 * obtain the beacon template.
3928 *
3929 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3930 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003931 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3932 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003933 *
3934 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3935 *
3936 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3937 */
3938struct sk_buff *
3939ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3940 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3941 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3942
3943/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003944 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3945 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003946 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003947 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3948 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3949 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3950 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3951 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3952 *
3953 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003954 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003955 *
3956 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3957 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003958 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3959 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003960 *
3961 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003962 *
3963 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003964 */
3965struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3967 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3968
3969/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003970 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3971 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003972 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003973 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003974 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003975 *
3976 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003977 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003978static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3980{
3981 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3982}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003983
3984/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003985 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3986 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3987 *
3988 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3989 * This function is called implicitly when
3990 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3991 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3992 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3993 *
3994 * Return: new csa counter value
3995 */
3996u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3997
3998/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003999 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4000 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4001 *
4002 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004003 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004004 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4005 */
4006void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4007
4008/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004009 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004010 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4011 *
4012 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4013 */
4014bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4015
4016
4017/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004018 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4019 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4020 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4021 *
4022 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4023 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4024 *
4025 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004026 *
4027 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004028 */
4029struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4030 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4031
4032/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004033 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4034 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4035 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4036 *
4037 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4038 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4039 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4040 *
4041 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4042 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004043 *
4044 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004045 */
4046struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4048
4049/**
4050 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4051 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4052 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4053 *
4054 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4055 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4056 * BSSID and address is used.
4057 *
4058 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4059 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004060 *
4061 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004062 */
4063struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4064 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4065
4066/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004067 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4068 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004069 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004070 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4071 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004072 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004073 *
4074 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4075 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004076 *
4077 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004078 */
4079struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004080 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004081 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004082 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004083
4084/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004085 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4086 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004087 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004088 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4089 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004090 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004091 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4092 *
4093 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4094 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4095 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4096 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4097 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004098void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004099 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004100 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004101 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4102
4103/**
4104 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4105 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004106 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004107 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004108 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004109 *
4110 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4111 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4112 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004113 *
4114 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004115 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004116__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4117 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004118 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004119
4120/**
4121 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4122 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004123 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004124 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4125 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004126 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004127 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4128 *
4129 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4130 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4131 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4132 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4133 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004134void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4135 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004136 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004137 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004138 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4139
4140/**
4141 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4142 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004143 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004144 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004145 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004146 *
4147 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4148 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4149 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004150 *
4151 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004152 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004153__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4154 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004155 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004156 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004157
4158/**
4159 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4160 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004161 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004162 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004163 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004164 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004165 *
4166 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4167 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004168 *
4169 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004170 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004171__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004173 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004174 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004175 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004176
4177/**
4178 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4179 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004180 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004181 *
4182 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4183 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4184 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4185 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004186 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4187 *
4188 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4189 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004190 *
4191 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4192 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4193 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4194 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4195 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4196 * use common code for all beacons.
4197 */
4198struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004199ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004200
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004201/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004202 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4203 *
4204 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4205 *
4206 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4207 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4208 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4209 */
4210void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4211 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4212
4213/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004214 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004215 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004216 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4217 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004218 *
4219 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004220 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4221 * with this P1K
4222 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004223 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004224static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4225 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4226{
4227 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4228 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4229 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4230
4231 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4232}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004233
4234/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004235 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4236 *
4237 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4238 * and transmitter address.
4239 *
4240 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4241 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4242 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4243 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4244 */
4245void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4246 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4247
4248/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004249 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4250 *
4251 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4252 * in the packet.
4253 *
4254 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4255 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4256 * encrypted with this key
4257 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4258 */
4259void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4260 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004261
4262/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004263 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4264 *
4265 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4266 * previously installed master key.
4267 *
4268 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4269 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4270 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4271 */
4272void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4273 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4274
4275/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004276 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
4277 *
4278 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
4279 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4280 * reverse order than in packet)
4281 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4282 * reverse order than in packet)
Jouni Malinen8ade5382015-01-24 19:52:09 +02004283 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4284 * reverse order than in packet)
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004285 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4286 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004287 */
4288struct ieee80211_key_seq {
4289 union {
4290 struct {
4291 u32 iv32;
4292 u16 iv16;
4293 } tkip;
4294 struct {
4295 u8 pn[6];
4296 } ccmp;
4297 struct {
4298 u8 pn[6];
4299 } aes_cmac;
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004300 struct {
4301 u8 pn[6];
Jouni Malinen8ade5382015-01-24 19:52:09 +02004302 } aes_gmac;
4303 struct {
4304 u8 pn[6];
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004305 } gcmp;
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004306 };
4307};
4308
4309/**
4310 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4311 *
4312 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4313 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4314 *
4315 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4316 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4317 * offloaded to the device.
4318 *
4319 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4320 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4321 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4322 */
4323void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4324 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4325
4326/**
4327 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4328 *
4329 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004330 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004331 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4332 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4333 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4334 *
4335 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4336 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4337 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4338 *
4339 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4340 * can be done concurrently.
4341 */
4342void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4343 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4344
4345/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004346 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4347 *
4348 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4349 * @seq: new sequence data
4350 *
4351 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4352 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4353 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4354 * ARP requests.
4355 *
4356 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4357 * can be done concurrently.
4358 */
4359void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4360 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4361
4362/**
4363 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4364 *
4365 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004366 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004367 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4368 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4369 * @seq: new sequence data
4370 *
4371 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4372 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4373 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4374 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4375 *
4376 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4377 * can be done concurrently.
4378 */
4379void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4380 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4381
4382/**
4383 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4384 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4385 *
4386 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4387 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4388 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4389 *
4390 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4391 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4392 */
4393void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4394
4395/**
4396 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4397 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4398 * @keyconf: new key data
4399 *
4400 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4401 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4402 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4403 *
4404 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4405 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4406 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4407 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4408 *
4409 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4410 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4411 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4412 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4413 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4414 * of the reconfiguration.
4415 *
4416 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4417 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4418 *
4419 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4420 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4421 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4422 * the key that's being replaced.
4423 */
4424struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4425ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4426 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4427
4428/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004429 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4430 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4431 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4432 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4433 * @gfp: allocation flags
4434 */
4435void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4436 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4437
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004438/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004439 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4440 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4441 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4442 *
4443 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4444 */
4445void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4446
4447/**
4448 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4449 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4450 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4451 *
4452 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4453 */
4454void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4455
4456/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004457 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4458 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4459 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4460 *
4461 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004462 *
4463 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004464 */
4465
4466int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4467
4468/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004469 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4470 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4471 *
4472 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4473 */
4474void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4475
4476/**
4477 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4478 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4479 *
4480 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4481 */
4482void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4483
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004484/**
4485 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4486 *
4487 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4488 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004489 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4490 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004491 *
4492 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004493 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004494 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004495void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004496
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004497/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004498 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4499 *
4500 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4501 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4502 *
4503 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4504 */
4505void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4506
4507/**
4508 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4509 *
4510 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4511 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4512 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4513 * while associating, for instance.
4514 *
4515 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4516 */
4517void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4518
4519/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004520 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4521 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4522 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4523 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4524 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4525 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4526 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4527 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004528 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004529 */
4530enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4531 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4532 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004533 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004534};
4535
4536/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004537 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4538 *
4539 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4540 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4541 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4542 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4543 *
4544 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4545 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4546 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4547 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4548 */
4549void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4550 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4551 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4552 void *data);
4553
4554/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004555 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004556 *
4557 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4558 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004559 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4560 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4561 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004562 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004563 *
4564 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004565 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004566 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004567 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4568 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004569static inline void
4570ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4571 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4572 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4573 void *data)
4574{
4575 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4576 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4577 iterator, data);
4578}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004579
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004580/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004581 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4582 *
4583 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4584 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4585 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4586 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004587 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004588 *
4589 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004590 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004591 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4592 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4593 */
4594void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004595 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004596 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4597 u8 *mac,
4598 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4599 void *data);
4600
4601/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004602 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4603 *
4604 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4605 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4606 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4607 *
4608 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4609 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4610 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4611 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4612 */
4613void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4614 u32 iter_flags,
4615 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4616 u8 *mac,
4617 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4618 void *data);
4619
4620/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004621 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4622 *
4623 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4624 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4625 * function for them.
4626 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4627 *
4628 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4629 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4630 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4631 */
4632void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4633 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4634 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4635 void *data);
4636/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004637 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4638 *
4639 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4640 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4641 *
4642 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4643 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4644 */
4645void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4646
4647/**
4648 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4649 *
4650 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4651 * workqueue.
4652 *
4653 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4654 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4655 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4656 */
4657void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4658 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4659 unsigned long delay);
4660
4661/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004662 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004663 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004664 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304665 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004666 *
4667 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004668 *
4669 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4670 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4671 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4672 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304673int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4674 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004675
4676/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004677 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004678 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004679 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4680 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4681 *
4682 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004683 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4684 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004685 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004686void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004687 u16 tid);
4688
4689/**
4690 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004691 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004692 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004693 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004694 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004695 *
4696 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4697 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4698 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4699 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004700int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004701
4702/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004703 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004704 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004705 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4706 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4707 *
4708 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004709 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4710 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004711 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004712void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004713 u16 tid);
4714
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004715/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004716 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4717 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004718 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004719 * @addr: station's address
4720 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004721 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4722 *
4723 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004724 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4725 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004726struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004727 const u8 *addr);
4728
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004729/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004730 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004731 *
4732 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004733 * @addr: remote station's address
4734 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004735 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004736 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4737 *
4738 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004739 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4740 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004741 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4742 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4743 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4744 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4745 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4746 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4747 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004748 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004749 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004750 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004751struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4752 const u8 *addr,
4753 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004754
4755/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004756 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4757 * @hw: the hardware
4758 * @pubsta: the station
4759 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4760 *
4761 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4762 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4763 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4764 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4765 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4766 *
4767 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4768 * manner.
4769 *
4770 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4771 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4772 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4773 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4774 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4775 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4776 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4777 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4778 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4779 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4780 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4781 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4782 * woke up while blocked or not.
4783 */
4784void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4785 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4786
4787/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004788 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4789 * @pubsta: the station
4790 *
4791 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4792 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4793 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4794 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4795 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004796 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4797 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4798 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4799 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4800 *
4801 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4802 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4803 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4804 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004805 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004806void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004807
4808/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004809 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4810 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4811 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4812 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4813 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4814 *
4815 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4816 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4817 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4818 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4819 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4820 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004821 *
4822 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4823 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4824 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004825 */
4826void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4827 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4828 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4829 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4830 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4831 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4832 void *data),
4833 void *iter_data);
4834
4835/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004836 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4837 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4838 * @iter: iterator function
4839 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4840 *
4841 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4842 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4843 * places while calling into the driver.
4844 *
4845 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4846 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4847 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004848 *
4849 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4850 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4851 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4852 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004853 */
4854void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4855 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4856 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4857 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4858 void *data),
4859 void *iter_data);
4860
4861/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004862 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4863 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4864 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4865 *
4866 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4867 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4868 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4869 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4870 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004871 * %NULL.
4872 *
4873 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004874 */
4875struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4876 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4877
4878/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004879 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4880 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004881 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004882 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004883 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004884 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004885 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4886 */
4887void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004888
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004889/**
4890 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4891 *
4892 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4893 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004894 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004895 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4896 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004897 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4898 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004899 *
4900 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4901 * without connection recovery attempts.
4902 */
4903void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4904
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004905/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004906 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4907 *
4908 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4909 *
4910 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4911 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4912 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4913 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4914 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4915 *
4916 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4917 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4918 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4919 * disconnect normally later.
4920 *
4921 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4922 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4923 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4924 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4925 */
4926void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4927
4928/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004929 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4930 * rssi threshold triggered
4931 *
4932 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4933 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4934 * @gfp: context flags
4935 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004936 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004937 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4938 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4939 */
4940void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4941 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4942 gfp_t gfp);
4943
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004944/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004945 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4946 *
4947 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4948 * @gfp: context flags
4949 */
4950void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4951
4952/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004953 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4954 *
4955 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4956 */
4957void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4958
4959/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004960 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4961 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4962 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4963 *
4964 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4965 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4966 */
4967void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4968
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004969/**
4970 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4971 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004972 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004973 *
4974 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4975 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4976 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4977 */
4978void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4979 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4980
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004981/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004982 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4983 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4984 */
4985void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4986
4987/**
4988 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4989 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4990 */
4991void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4992
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004993/**
4994 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4995 *
4996 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4997 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4998 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4999 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5000 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5001 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5002 *
5003 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5004 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5005 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5006 */
5007void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5008 const u8 *addr);
5009
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005010/**
5011 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5012 *
5013 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5014 * buffer.
5015 *
5016 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5017 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5018 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5019 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5020 */
5021void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5022
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005023/**
5024 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5025 *
5026 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5027 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5028 * reordering.
5029 *
5030 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5031 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5032 *
5033 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5034 * @addr: station mac address
5035 * @tid: the rx tid
5036 */
5037void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5038 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5039
5040/**
5041 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5042 *
5043 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5044 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5045 * reordering.
5046 *
5047 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5048 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5049 *
5050 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5051 * @addr: station mac address
5052 * @tid: the rx tid
5053 */
5054void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5055 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5056
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005057/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005058
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005059/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005060 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005061 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005062 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5063 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5064 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005065 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5066 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005067 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5068 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5069 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5070 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5071 * RTS threshold
5072 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5073 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005074 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005075 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5076 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005077 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005078 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005079 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005080 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005081struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5082 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5083 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5084 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5085 struct sk_buff *skb;
5086 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5087 bool rts, short_preamble;
5088 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005089 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005090 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005091 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005092};
5093
5094struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005095 const char *name;
5096 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005097 void (*free)(void *priv);
5098
5099 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5100 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005101 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005102 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305103 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005104 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005105 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5106 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005107 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5108 void *priv_sta);
5109
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005110 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5111 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5112 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5113 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005114 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5115 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5116 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005117 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5118 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005119
5120 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5121 struct dentry *dir);
5122 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005123
5124 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005125};
5126
5127static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5128 enum ieee80211_band band,
5129 int index)
5130{
5131 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5132}
5133
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005134/**
5135 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5136 *
5137 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5138 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5139 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5140 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5141 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5142 * not null.
5143 *
5144 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5145 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5146 *
5147 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5148 * that this may be null.
5149 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5150 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5151 */
5152bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5153 void *priv_sta,
5154 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5155
5156
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005157static inline s8
5158rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5159 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5160{
5161 int i;
5162
5163 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5164 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5165 return i;
5166
5167 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005168 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005169
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005170 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005171 return 0;
5172}
5173
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005174static inline
5175bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5176 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5177{
5178 unsigned int i;
5179
5180 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5181 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5182 return true;
5183 return false;
5184}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005185
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005186/**
5187 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5188 *
5189 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5190 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5191 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5192 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5193 *
5194 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5195 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5196 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5197 */
5198int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5199 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5200 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5201
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005202int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5203void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005204
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005205static inline bool
5206conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5207{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005208 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005209}
5210
5211static inline bool
5212conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5213{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005214 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5215 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005216}
5217
5218static inline bool
5219conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5220{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005221 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5222 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005223}
5224
5225static inline bool
5226conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5227{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005228 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005229}
5230
5231static inline bool
5232conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5233{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005234 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5235 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5236 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005237}
5238
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005239static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5240ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5241{
5242 if (p2p) {
5243 switch (type) {
5244 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5245 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5246 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5247 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5248 default:
5249 break;
5250 }
5251 }
5252 return type;
5253}
5254
5255static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5256ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5257{
5258 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5259}
5260
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005261void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5262 int rssi_min_thold,
5263 int rssi_max_thold);
5264
5265void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005266
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005267/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005268 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005269 *
5270 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5271 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005272 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5273 *
5274 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5275 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005276 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005277int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5278
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005279/**
5280 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5281 * @vif: virtual interface
5282 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5283 * @gfp: allocation flags
5284 *
5285 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5286 */
5287void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5288 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5289 gfp_t gfp);
5290
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005291/**
5292 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5293 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5294 * @vif: virtual interface
5295 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5296 * @band: the band to transmit on
5297 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5298 *
5299 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5300 */
5301bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5302 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5303 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5304
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005305/**
5306 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5307 *
5308 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5309 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5310 *
5311 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5312 *
5313 * private:
5314 *
5315 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5316 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5317 */
5318struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5319 u32 next_tsf;
5320 bool has_next_tsf;
5321
5322 u8 absent;
5323
5324 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5325 struct {
5326 u32 start;
5327 u32 duration;
5328 u32 interval;
5329 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5330};
5331
5332/**
5333 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5334 *
5335 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5336 * @data: NoA tracking data
5337 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5338 *
5339 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5340 */
5341int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5342 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5343
5344/**
5345 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5346 *
5347 * @data: NoA tracking data
5348 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5349 */
5350void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5351
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005352/**
5353 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5354 * @vif: virtual interface
5355 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5356 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5357 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5358 * @gfp: allocation flags
5359 *
5360 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5361 */
5362void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5363 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5364 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005365
5366/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005367 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5368 *
5369 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5370 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5371 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5372 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5373 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5374 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5375 *
5376 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5377 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5378 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5379 *
5380 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5381 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5382 *
5383 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5384 */
5385int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5386
5387/**
5388 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5389 *
5390 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5391 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5392 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5393 *
5394 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5395 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5396 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5397 *
5398 * @sta: the station
5399 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5400 */
5401void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5402
5403/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005404 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5405 *
5406 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5407 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5408 *
5409 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5410 */
5411struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5412 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005413#endif /* MAC80211_H */